JP6738115B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) and a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board having a game area in which a game is played, and a door frame having a door window that closes the front side of the game board and makes the game area visible from the front. And are provided so that the player can be entertained by playing a game in the game area that can be seen through the door window.

As a gaming machine of this type, a bulging portion that is provided with a storage tray for storing a game medium for playing a game and bulges forward from below the door window on the front surface of the door frame, and the bulging portion An ornamental body attached to the upper surface has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique of Patent Document 1, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

However, including the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 , the operation unit for performing the player participation type effect is often provided in the bulge portion that is easy for the player to operate, but the bulge for providing the operation unit Since the space of the section is limited, the size of the operation section is unremarkable, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced.

JP 2012-029741A

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, it is an object to provide a Yu technique's game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention is
A gaming machine having an upper plate area and a lower plate area capable of storing game balls, and provided with a plate means that bulges forward under the game area,
The dish means is provided with an operation means capable of accepting an operation by a player,
Between empty said tray means, wherein operating means are provided, formed by a member which constitutes the member and the lower tray region constitutes at least the upper tray area,
The operation means includes an operation acceptance section capable of accepting an operation, and an operation acceptance section operation means capable of operating the operation acceptance section without being operated by a player, and the operation means in the height direction. The operation receiving portion operating means has a size ranging from a position above the upper plate area at a position located behind the means to a lower side than the upper plate area, and the operation receiving section operating means constitutes the upper plate area. It is characterized in that it is provided below the member.
In addition to the above invention, the following means may be adopted.
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played,
A main body frame holding the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that closes the front side of the main body frame so that the game area can be viewed from the front,
A bulging portion that bulges forward from a portion of the front surface of the door frame base that is lower than the door window, and that has a storage tray that can store a game medium for playing a game in the game area; ,
The front end is attached to the bulging portion and is located in front of the front end of the storage tray and forward from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base. A protruding ornament,
And a decoration light emitting means for lighting and decorating the decoration according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area."

Here, "game" means "entering a game medium aiming at a specific entrance for which a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium to the specific entrance is When a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific entrance for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game media. "Entering a game", "Entering a game medium aiming at an entrance to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given", "A plurality of symbols each having a plurality of symbols on which a game medium is inserted After rotating the rotating body, a game in which the rotation of each rotating body is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given”, and the like. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "spherical one (game ball)", "disc-shaped one (medal)", and the like.

In addition, as a “game area” in which a game is played, “a game medium is driven by a player's operation, and a plurality of entrances are provided to which a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to acceptance of the game medium. "The area that is being played", "Each of which is provided with a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of the symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. A region in which a plurality of rotating bodies to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is provided is arranged accordingly.

As the "main body frame", "a frame that can be opened and closed (a hinge can be rotated) with respect to a frame-shaped outer frame that is attached to an island facility of a game hall in which a game machine is installed", "a game machine is The one directly attached to the island facility of the game hall to be installed", "one equipped with a game medium payout device for playing a game", and the like.

Further, as the "bulging part", in addition to the storage tray, "one having an operation portion operated by a player to play a game", "a storage tray storing a game medium for playing a game" "Equipped", "Equipped with a production operation unit that can accept the operation of the player when the player participation type production is executed", "Lending operation unit for lending a game medium for playing a game" And the like” and the like.

Further, examples of the "reservoir dish" include "one provided with a plurality of vertically separated", "one provided with only one", and the like.

Further, as the "decorative body", "imitation of a predetermined item according to the concept of a gaming machine", "imitation of a predetermined character according to the concept of a gaming machine", "according to the concept of a gaming machine" Which imitates a predetermined scene". The reason that the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decorative body is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base is that the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the overall width. This is because the amount of protrusion to the front is the same as that of conventional gaming machines and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the appeal to the player. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the full width, the ornament will protrude too much to the front. This is because it may interfere with the player and make it difficult to select it as a gaming machine to play.

Further, as "according to the gaming state", "games to the entrances (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a big winning opening, a prize winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the playing area" "In response to receiving medium", "In response to the game medium circulating in the game area having passed through a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.)", "Receiver placed in the game area" According to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game medium to the entrance (for example, the starting opening)," "Lottery is selected by accepting the game medium to the entrance (for example, starting opening) arranged in the game area According to the type of production for suggesting the special lottery result (for example, reach production, jackpot production, lost production, etc.), "a plurality of symbols each provided with a plurality of symbols triggered by the insertion of the game medium According to the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotating body, after rotating a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and sequentially stopping, , "According to the amount of the game medium driven into the game area", "according to the length of the blank of the game medium driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, as the "decorative body light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube", etc. Can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 1, a game board having a game area in which a game is played, a main body frame detachably holding the game board from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front, and the front of the door frame base bulges forward from a portion below the door window, A bulging part equipped with a storage tray capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and attached to the bulging part, in front of the front end of the storage tray, from the front of the door frame base to the front The decorative body whose front end projects to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base, and the light emitting decoration according to the game state that changes as the decorative body is played in the game area. And a decorative body light emitting means.

As a result, a swelling portion provided with a storage tray capable of storing the game medium swells forward at a site below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that opens and closes the main body frame. In addition, the bulging portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when this game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decoration body is projected far below the door window where the inside of the game area is visible, so the decoration body is more visible than other game machines. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the present game machine can be easily selected as the game machine to play. Further, since the front end of the decorative body is largely projected forward under the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than that in the conventional case. Can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his or her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage dish, it is possible to reduce the portion hidden by the player's hand with respect to the entire ornament. It is possible to make the player easily notice the light-emitting decoration of the decoration when the decoration light-emitting means is used to perform light-emission decoration, prevent the player from feeling lost, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can be made.

Further, since the ornamental body is largely projected forward under the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the ornamental body is as close to the player as possible. Therefore, when the ornament light emitting means is used to emit light to decorate the ornament according to the gaming state, the light illuminates the player from below, and the luminous ornament of the ornament directs the player's line of sight to the ornament. At the same time, by directing the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body, it is possible to make the inside of the game area provided in the front away from the player's field of view and make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. .. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, big winning opening, role winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., the decorative body is illuminated by the decorative body light emitting means so that the player can pay attention to the decorative body below the game area, and then when the player returns his line of sight to the game area, By changing the rendering image and the movable body, it is possible to surprise the player with a strong impact, entertain the player, and there is something good for the player. It is possible to make people feel as if they are there, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by increasing the sense of expectation for games.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area by making the decoration light-embellish according to the game state and changing the effect in the gap. The light emission decoration can indicate to the player that a chance has come (for example, the generation of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (“big hit game”)). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the light-emitting decoration of the decoration body, which can excite and excite the player depending on whether or not the decoration body emits light, and entertains the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration body is largely projected to the front, when the player tries to see the whole decoration body, he/she looks away from the game machine, which makes it easy to see the entire game machine including the game area. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has been placed in one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

The decorative body may be smoothly curved and projected forward. As a result, since the ornamental body that protrudes largely forward is smoothly curved, even if it comes into contact with the player, there is no risk of damaging the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous and may cause an injury only by looking at the decoration, so that the player can select this game machine with confidence as a game machine to play. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game on the gaming machine and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, it is desirable to attach the decorative body to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. As a result, the presence of the ornamental body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the present game machine can be easily selected as the game machine to play by increasing the appealing power to the player. Further, when the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the operation portion (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area is operated. It is possible to facilitate the operation and the handling of the game medium stored in the storage tray, and it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the ornamental body may be provided with a first ornamental portion having a semicircular cross-sectional shape and extending in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward. As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body has a shape in which half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline in interest, and at the first glance, it is difficult for the player to get injured It is possible to recognize that the game is safe and to reassure the player, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, when the decoration body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration portion, and the entire decoration of the first decoration portion is light-emitted by the decoration light emitting means in accordance with the game state, a ring-shaped fluorescent lamp Such a luminescent decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. At the time of luminescent decoration, for example, when the luminescent decoration is such that light flows from one side, the inside of the donut Since it is possible to show the player a luminous effect as if light is moving and rotating, it is possible to surprise the player and think that there is something good, and expectation for the game It can be increased to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the decorative body, a foot bar provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and has a semi-circular shape. You may make it further provide the 2nd decoration part extended in a semi-annular shape so that it may bulge outward in a cross-sectional shape. As a result, the first decoration portion and the second decoration portion can show the player a decoration in which half donuts are arranged vertically, and the appearance of the bulging portion including the storage dish can be improved. At the same time, since the tip of the second decorative portion is located rearward of the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body look larger. It is possible to make a gaming machine with a high appealing power that attracts the user's interest. Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration part and the second decoration part are arranged vertically, by appropriately decorating each of them by the decoration body light-emitting means, light emission that rotates the light is performed. It is possible to show the player and the light emitting effect in which the light moves up and down, to entertain the player, and at the same time to show the player a variety of light emitting effects, which makes the player tired. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest by making it difficult.

In addition, a production operation unit capable of accepting the operation of the player according to the game state may be provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the ornament. Thereby, when the operation of the effect operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player operates the effect operation unit, so that the player participation type It is possible to entertain the production, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. At this time, by causing the ornament light-emitting means to emit light to decorate the ornament body, the player's interest can be attracted to the ornament body to which the effect operation unit is attached. When the participatory production is executed, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (production operation unit) to prompt the operation of the production operation unit, and the production operation to the player. By operating the parts, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is attached to the rear side of the front end on the upper surface of the ornament, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, or the like from contacting the effect operation unit by the ornament. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the effect operation unit, it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the ornament body that projects greatly to the front, the effect operation unit can be seen large and can give a strong impact to the player, and this game is a game machine to be played. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine, and to increase the expectation for the player-participating effect that operates the effect operation unit so that the player-participating effect is executed early (for example, the game medium). It is possible to prompt a (game ball) driving operation, start of rotation of the rotating body by inserting a game medium (medal), etc., and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the ornament, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotationally operated by the player, and an inside of the rotation operation unit. In, it is desirable that the player has a pressing operation section that can be operated by pressing. As a result, since the rotary operation unit that can be rotated and the push operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation can be performed in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted. Since it is possible to allow the player to operate by appropriately combining and pressing operation, and it is possible to deal with the production that requires more complicated input (operation of the player), a variety of player participation type productions can be provided. It can be presented to the player, entertaining the player, making the player less likely to get tired, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this case, since the decoration body on which the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit are attached to the upper surface can be light-emitted and decorated by the decoration body light emitting means, the decoration body can be displayed when the player participation type effect is executed. By illuminating and decorating, the player's interest can be directed to the ornamental body (the production operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the press operation unit) to prompt the operation of the production operation unit, and the player operates the production operation unit. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the player can be prompted to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation section or the pressing operation section by the light emitting mode of the ornament, the rotation operation section or the press operation can be performed to the player. The operation unit can be operated accurately, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the ring-shaped rotation operating portion and the pressing operation portion arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion are provided on the upper surface of the decorative body as the production operating portion, the pressing operation is performed. The part may be made movable between a retracted position that projects slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation part and a projected position that projects above the retracted position depending on the gaming state. good. As a result, when the pressing operation section is moved to the protruding position in accordance with the game state, the pressing operation section is in a state of protruding above the rotation operation section, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large together with the rotation operation section. Since it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration appear larger and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and making it more appealing to the player than other gaming machines. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player by pressing the operation section by projecting the pressing operation section to a large degree, thereby increasing the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation section and suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

Further, when the pressing operation part in the ring of the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the ornament is made movable between the retracted position and the protruding position, the pressing operation part is moved by the player at the protruding position. A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part that can be pressed, and a cylindrical center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part and that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. You may make it comprised with a press operation part. As a result, on the upper surface of the decorative body that projects significantly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are concentrically arranged around the central pressing operation portion, so that the appearance impact can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type production in which each operation unit is operated, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. You can Further, in this case, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, by extension, the rotation operation section, the outer peripheral pressing operation section, and the central pressing operation section, to promote those operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to include an operation unit light emitting unit that causes the effect operation unit to emit light according to the game state. With this, since the effect operation section can be illuminated and decorated by the operation section light emitting means in accordance with the game state, by performing the light emitting decoration of the effect operation section and the light emitting decoration of the ornament by the ornament light emitting means at the same time. The entire bulging part that bulges forward under the door window can be decorated with light emission, and the bulging part can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention strongly and the whole luminescent decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Further, in this case, since the production operation unit is illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the production operation unit, so that the player participation type production for operating the production operation unit can be performed. When it is executed, the production operation unit can be illuminated and decorated to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit to prompt the operation, and by allowing the player to operate the production operation unit, player participation type production You can entertain and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the front surface of the door frame base may be further provided with a peripheral decoration body which is continuous with the decoration body attached to the bulging portion and extends so as to surround the outer periphery of the door frame. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the game area can be decorated, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and the appealing power to the player can be increased. Further, in this case, it is desirable to provide a peripheral decoration light-emitting means for performing a luminous decoration on the peripheral decoration, and the decoration of the bulging portion and the peripheral decoration are respectively made to emit light so that the periphery of the game area is made to emit light. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the decrease in interest.

Moreover, you may make it provide the effect display means which can display an effect image in the center of the game area|region in front view. As a result, the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on the effect display means in addition to the game performed in the game area, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, when the effect images are being displayed by the effect display means, when the effect images are switched, the decorative body is caused to emit light so that the player's line of sight is directed to the decorative object below the game area, making it difficult to notice the effect image switching. can do. Then, when the player turns his/her eyes on the effect display means after the effect images have been switched, it can be surprised that the effect images have changed, and the effect images can be made more entertaining and, at the same time, the effect By switching the images, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The ornamental body is
It smoothly curves and protrudes forward”.

According to the structure of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved and protrudes forward.

As a result, since the ornamental body that protrudes largely forward is smoothly curved, even if it comes into contact with the player, there is no risk of damaging the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous and may cause an injury only by looking at the decoration, so that the player can select this game machine with confidence as a game machine to play. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game on the gaming machine and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The ornamental body is
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction”.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the ornamental body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

As a result, since the decoration body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decoration body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. This gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine for playing with increased power. Further, since the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player to the front. Therefore, an operating portion (handle for driving the game medium into the game area (handle) It is possible to facilitate the operation of) and the handling of the game medium stored in the storage tray, and it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 4: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 3,
"The ornamental body is
It is provided with a first decorative portion which has a semi-circular cross-sectional shape and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward.”

According to the structure of the means 4, the ornamental body is provided with the first ornamental portion which has a semicircular cross-sectional shape and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward.

As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body has a semi-circular cross section that extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward, so that half of the cylindrical tubular donut projects forward. Since it has such a form, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a calm mood, so that the player can concentrate on the game. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest in the game, and at the first glance the player can recognize that it is safe and not injured even if it comes into contact. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion has a semi-doughnut shape, if the entire decoration of the first decorative portion is light-emitted according to the game state, light emission such as an annular fluorescent lamp will occur. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. For example, when the light emitting decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the light emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating inside the donut. It can surprise you to think that something good is happening, and you can raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Means 5: In the configuration of Means 4,
"The ornamental body is
The front end is arranged below the first decorative portion so as to be located rearward of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward in a semi-arcuate cross-sectional shape. The second decorative portion is further provided”.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the ornamental body is arranged below the first ornamental portion so that the front end is located rearward of the first ornamental portion, and bulges outward with a semi-arcuate cross-sectional shape. A second decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape is further provided.

As a result, the first decoration portion and the second decoration portion can show the player a decoration in which half donuts are arranged vertically, and the appearance of the bulging portion including the storage dish can be improved. At the same time, since the tip of the second decorative portion is located rearward of the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body look larger. It is possible to make a gaming machine with a high appealing power that attracts the user's interest.

Further, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged above and below, by appropriately illuminating and decorating each of them by the decorative body light emitting means, a light emitting effect such as rotating light, It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light moves up and down, entertain the player, and at the same time show a variety of light-emitting effects to the player, making the player less tired. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"It further comprises a production operation unit that is attached to the rear side of the front end of the upper surface of the ornamental body and that can accept the operation of the player according to the game state". To do.

Here, as the "production operation unit", "rotation operation unit capable of rotating operation", "push operation unit capable of pressing operation", "touch operation unit capable of touch operation", "slide operation unit capable of slide operation" , "Stick operation unit capable of stick operation", "composite operation unit capable of rotating operation and pressing operation", and the like. In addition, the "effect operation unit" may be in contact with the upper surface of the ornament, or may be protruded from the upper surface of the ornament.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine is further provided with a performance operation unit which is attached to the rear side of the front end on the upper surface of the ornament and which can accept the operation of the player according to the game state. is there.

As a result, since the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the ornament, when the operation of the effect operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player By operating the effect operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. At this time, by causing the ornament light-emitting means to emit light to decorate the ornament body, the player's interest can be attracted to the ornament body to which the effect operation unit is attached. When the participatory production is executed, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (production operation unit) to prompt the operation of the production operation unit, and the production operation to the player. By operating the parts, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end of the ornament, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, or the like from coming into contact with the effect operation unit by the ornament. It is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the effect operation unit, to surely entertain the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, because the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that projects significantly forward, the effect operation unit can be seen large and can give a strong impact to the player, and this game machine is selected as the game machine to play. It is possible to make it easier to perform, and to increase the expectation for the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation part, so that the player participatory effect is executed at an early stage (for example, a game medium (a game ball ), the start of rotation of the rotating body by inserting a game medium (medal), and the like), which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the ornament, since the ornament decorates the outside of the effect operation unit, the appearance of the effect operation unit can be improved. The production operation unit can be made conspicuous, and the game machine can be strongly attracted by the player.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The production operation unit is
A ring-shaped rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player,
And a pressing operation section that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation section."

Here, examples of the "rotation operation unit" include "a unit that can be rotated by driving a motor in addition to a player's rotation operation", "a unit that can be rotated only by a player's rotation operation", and the like.

Further, the "push operation part" includes a "cylindrical outer circumference push operation part along the inner circumference of the rotation operation part, and a cylindrical central push operation part provided in the outer circumference push operation part". , "One columnar one", "one provided with a cross key or an arrow key", and the like. Further, examples of the "push operation portion" include "a portion that can be moved up and down in the vertical direction between a retracted position and a projected position", "a portion that cannot be moved in the vertical direction", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the production operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotationally operated by the player, and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit. It was done.

As a result, since the rotary operation unit that can be rotated and the push operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation can be performed in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted. Since it is possible to allow the player to operate by appropriately combining and pressing operation, and it is possible to deal with the production that requires more complicated input (operation of the player), a variety of player participation type productions can be provided. It can be presented to the player, entertaining the player, making the player less likely to get tired, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the decoration body having the rotation operation section and the pressing operation section mounted on the upper surface can be light-embellished by the decoration light-emitting means, the decoration body is light-embellished when the player participation type production is executed. By doing so, the player's interest can be directed to the ornamental body (the production operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit) to prompt the operation of the production operation unit, and the player can operate the production operation unit. It is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the player can be prompted to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation section or the pressing operation section by the light emitting mode of the ornament, the rotation operation section or the press operation can be performed to the player. The operation unit can be operated accurately, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, it is desirable that the diameter of the rotation operation portion be larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the storage dish. As a result, the front end side of the rotation operating portion is projected to the front side more than the storage tray, so that the rotation operating portion can be made to be significantly conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the gaming machine is different from other gaming machines, and it is possible to easily select the gaming machine as a gaming machine to play. In addition, when the diameter of the rotary operation unit is increased, it is possible to immediately recognize to the player that the rotary operation unit is for rotational operation, and when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the production, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the circular rotary operation part is increased, the inner diameter of the rotary operation part can be increased to increase the pressing operation part in the ring. This makes it easier to entertain the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit and suppresses a decrease in interest.

Means 8: In the configuration of means 7,
"The pressing operation unit is
It is movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruding position that protrudes above the retracted position according to the game state." Is characterized in that

Here, as the "pressing operation part" movable between the retracted position and the projecting position, "what can be moved to the retracted position when the player presses the projecting position", "the player at the projecting position" Cannot be moved to the retracted position even if is pressed."

According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation portion is provided between the retracted position that slightly protrudes above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion according to the game state, and the protruding position that protrudes above the retracted position. , Is designed to be movable.

As a result, when the pressing operation section is moved to the protruding position in accordance with the game state, the pressing operation section is in a state of protruding above the rotation operation section, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large together with the rotation operation section. Since it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration appear larger and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and making it more appealing to the player than other gaming machines. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player by pressing the operation section by projecting the pressing operation section to a large degree, thereby increasing the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation section and suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

Further, since the pressing operation unit is movable between the retracted position and the projecting position, the player's interest can be directed to the rotation operating unit in the retracted position, and the player's interest can be obtained in the projecting position. Since it can be directed to the pressing operation unit, by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, it is possible to prompt the player to the operation unit to be operated, It is possible to allow the player to appropriately operate the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit to enjoy the player participation type effect.

Means 9: In the configuration of means 8,
"The pressing operation unit is
A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player at the protruding position,
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and is provided with a cylindrical central pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position." It is characterized by

According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation portion is arranged in the cylinder of the cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation portion that the player can perform the pressing operation at the protruding position, and the outer periphery pressing operation portion. The player is provided with a cylindrical central pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player at any of the positions.

As a result, on the upper surface of the decorative body that projects significantly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are concentrically arranged around the central pressing operation portion, so that the appearance impact can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type production in which each operation unit is operated, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. You can Further, by decorating the ornament with light emission, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the ornament, and by extension, the rotation operation part, the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and the central pressing operation part, to promote those operations, It is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation section inside the rotation operation section is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation section, the outer circumference pressing operation section, and the rotation operation section have the same height, and the rotation operation section and the center pressing operation are When the pressing operation part is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation part and the outer peripheral pressing operation part are in a state of protruding above the rotation operating part, and the central pressing operation part, The outer circumference pressing operation section and the rotation operation section can be operated. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type production, the operation unit operable by the player can be properly used, and more various productions can be dealt with and the player can enjoy various operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen, which gives the player the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusionary player tries to rotate the outer circumference pressing operation unit, the outer circumference pressing operation unit does not rotate, so the game is played. It is possible to irritate the player and give a sense of tension to the flow of production to entertain the player.

Means 10: In any one configuration of Means 6 to 9,
"It further comprises an operating section light emitting means for making the effect operating section light and decorate according to the game state".

Here, as the "operation unit light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube", etc. Are listed.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is further provided with an operating portion light emitting means for causing the effect operating portion to emit light according to the game state.

Thus, the effect operation unit can be light-emitted and decorated by the operation unit light-emission unit according to the game state, so that the light-emission decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emission decoration of the ornament by the ornament light-emission unit can be simultaneously executed. The entire bulging part that bulges forward under the door window can be decorated with light emission, and the bulging part can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention strongly and the whole luminescent decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the production operation unit is light-emitted and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the production operation unit, so that the player participation type production for operating the production operation unit is executed. Occasionally, by illuminating the effect operation unit, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the effect operation unit and prompt the operation, and by allowing the player to operate the effect operation unit, entertaining the player participation type effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 11: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played,
A main body frame holding the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that closes the front side of the main body frame so that the game area can be viewed from the front,
A bulging portion that bulges forward from a portion of the front surface of the door frame base that is lower than the door window, and that has a storage tray that can store a game medium for playing a game in the game area; ,
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, has a semi-circular cross-sectional shape, and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward, and the front end is in front of the front end of the storage tray and the door frame The first decorative portion protruding from the front surface of the base to the front by a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base, and the front end of the first decorative portion positioned rearward of the first decorative portion. A decorative body which is arranged below the first decorative portion and has a second decorative portion which extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular cross-sectional shape,
Decorative body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decorative body in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area,
An upper surface of the rotary operation part, which is attached to the rear side of the front end of the upper surface of the ornamental body, has an annular rotation operation part which can be rotationally operated by a player, and the ring of the rotation operation part according to the game state. A cylinder that is movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly above the retracted position and a protruding position that protrudes above the retracted position, and that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position. Shaped outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion which is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and can be operated by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. A production operation unit that includes a pressing operation unit and is capable of accepting an operation by a player according to the game state,
It is provided with an operation part light emitting means for making the effect operation part light and decorate according to the game state."

According to the structure of the means 11, the game machine has a game board having a game area in which a game is played, a main body frame detachably holding the game board from the front, and the front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front, and the front of the door frame base bulges forward from a portion below the door window, A bulging part equipped with a storage dish capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and attached to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction, bulging outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape So that it extends in a semi-annular shape, and the front end projects forward from the front end of the storage tray to the front from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base. One decorative portion, and the front end is located below the first decorative portion so as to be located rearward of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward with a semi-arcuate cross-sectional shape. From the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the decorative body including the second decorative portion, the decorative body light emitting means for performing the light emitting decoration according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. In the ring-shaped rotary operation part, which is also attached to the rear side and can be rotated by the player, and in the ring of the rotary operation part, the retracted position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation part according to the game state. And a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that is movable between a protruding position protruding above the retracted position and that can be pressed by the player at the protruding position, and an outer peripheral pressing operation portion. The player is provided with a pressing operation section including a cylindrical central pressing operation section which is arranged in the cylinder and can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position, and the player's The present invention is provided with a production operation unit capable of accepting an operation, and an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the production operation unit according to the game state.

As a result, a swelling portion provided with a storage tray capable of storing the game medium swells forward at a site below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that opens and closes the main body frame. In addition, the bulging portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. The central pressing operation part, the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and the rotation operating part are concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the. As a result, when this game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decorative body with the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface projects greatly forward below the door window where the inside of the game area can be seen, The decorative body can be made more prominent than other gaming machines, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. This gaming machine can be selected as a gaming machine to play. Can be made easier. Further, since the front end of the decorative body is largely projected forward under the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than that in the conventional case. Can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his or her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage dish, it is possible to reduce the portion hidden by the player's hand with respect to the entire ornament. It is possible to make the player easily notice the light-emitting decoration of the decoration when the decoration light-emitting means is used to perform light-emission decoration, prevent the player from feeling lost, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can be made.

Further, since the ornamental body is largely projected forward under the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the ornamental body is as close to the player as possible. Therefore, depending on the game state, when the decorative body light emitting means is used to decorate the decorative body with light, or the operating portion light emitting means is used to emit light to decorate the operating body, the light illuminates the player from below, The decoration of the decoration and the effect operation unit can be used to direct the player's line of sight to the lower decoration and effect operation unit, and the player's line of sight can be directed downward to provide a game provided in the front. The area can be kept away from the player's field of view to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, big winning opening, role winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., by directing the decoration body and the effect operation unit to emit light, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area, and when the player then returns the line of sight to the game area, the effect image and the movable body are displayed. By changing things, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and make a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area by making the decoration light-embellish according to the game state and changing the effect in the gap. The light emission decoration can indicate to the player that a chance has come (for example, the generation of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (“big hit game”)). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the light-emitting decoration of the decoration body, which can excite and excite the player depending on whether or not the decoration body emits light, and entertains the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration body is largely projected to the front, when the player tries to see the whole decoration body, he/she looks away from the game machine, which makes it easy to see the entire game machine including the game area. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has been placed in one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to make it easier to select this game machine as a game machine for playing by increasing the number of games. Further, since the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player to the front. Therefore, an operating portion (handle for driving the game medium into the game area (handle) It is possible to facilitate the operation of) and the handling of the game medium stored in the storage tray, and it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below the decorative body have a semi-circular cross-section that extends in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward. Since the half of the tube-shaped donut projects forward, it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and to make the player play in a calm mood. It is possible to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline of interest, and at the first glance, it is possible to let the player recognize that it is safe and injured even if it comes into contact, Reassuring the player can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the decoration and the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decoration are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, whereby the entire bulging portion that bulges forward under the door window can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, it is possible to make the bulging part conspicuous and attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to make the player think that something good may be done by the overall light emission decoration. It is possible to direct the player's interest to the effect operation unit and urge the operation, and by allowing the player to operate the effect operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, since the first decoration portion and the second decoration portion are in the shape of a semi-doughnut, if the decoration light emitting means causes the entire first decoration portion and the second decoration portion to emit light according to the game state. A light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. For example, when the light emitting decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the light emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and think that something is good, and the rotation operation part mounted on the top surface of the ornament is changed in the direction in which the light of the first ornament part and the second ornament part is rotating. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction as. Alternatively, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below are alternately light-emitted and decorated, so that the player can be made to see a light-emitting effect in which light moves up and down, and at the same time, vertically. The moving light can prompt the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit or the central pressing operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotating operation unit or press the pressing operation unit by appropriately illuminating and decorating the first decoration unit and the second decoration unit. On the other hand, the rotation operation part or the pressing operation part can be operated accurately, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decorative body that projects significantly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotating operation portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the appearance impact can be enhanced. , It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type effect of operating each operation unit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

Further, when the pressing operation section inside the rotation operation section is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation section, the outer circumference pressing operation section, and the rotation operation section have the same height, and the rotation operation section and the center pressing operation are When the pressing operation part is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation part and the outer peripheral pressing operation part are in a state of protruding above the rotation operating part, and the central pressing operation part, The outer circumference pressing operation section and the rotation operation section can be operated. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type production, the operation unit operable by the player can be properly used, and more various productions can be dealt with and the player can enjoy various operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation section is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section can be seen, which may give the player the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation section can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusionary player tries to rotate the outer circumference pressing operation unit, the outer circumference pressing operation unit does not rotate, so the game is played. It is possible to irritate the player and give a sense of tension to the flow of production to entertain the player.

Means 12: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of inlets that are arranged in the game area and can receive game media,
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "reception opening" is "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area", "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium. Starting prize hole (starting opening) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate "the game medium is received in a specific inlet (chucker) in the game area, "Variable winning openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.)", "Ordinary lottery drawn by the game medium passing through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the variable winning opening (variable starting opening, winning portion winning opening, etc.) that allows the receiving of the game medium", "the specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the game medium is favored by the acceptance of the game medium. "Winning hole (variable starting port)", "V winning hole that generates an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning hole is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", Examples of the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage include a large winning opening and a winning slot for winning a game medium that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, as a "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by receiving a game medium into the starting opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means According to the special symbol is displayed after changing the stop display, the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result which is drawn by the combination of the stopped special symbols and the special lottery result display means for the advantageous game state. When a special lottery result to be generated is displayed, an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing the special winning opening (a so-called digital pachi machine)", "character winning When the distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth and the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the player winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. An advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (what is called a so-called honey machine)", "has a special winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is selected by receiving a game medium into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is predetermined. And the like, which includes an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing in a pattern of (a so-called multifunction machine).

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is provided with a game area in which a game medium is driven by an operation of the player, a plurality of receiving openings arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium, and a game to the receiving opening. A pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the media. With this, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-described means.

In addition, it is desirable that the light emitting decoration of the ornament by the ornament light emitting means is executed by receiving the game medium, which has been driven into the game area, at the receiving port. As a result, when a game medium is received in the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are dispensed, and the decoration is light-emitted, so that the player can entertain the game medium by making it entertaining. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous game state in which the player receives an advantage in receiving the game medium into the starting opening, and the result is presented to the player when the result of the special lottery is suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decoration body may be illuminated and decorated by the decoration body light emitting means. As a result, since the decoration body emits light, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect described above and entertain the player. Therefore, the special lottery result selected by the player is It is possible to think that the advantageous gaming state becomes advantageous (for example, "big hit"), and it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, as described above, since the movable effect having a higher effect can be shown to the player by illuminating the ornament, the effect for suggesting to the player the special lottery result selected by lottery (for example, It can be preferably used for reach production) and can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of revolving bodies each having a plurality of patterns,
A starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is loaded,
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, respectively,
A slot machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all of the spinning bodies that are stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operation parts. It is characterized by

Here, as the “slot machine”, “one in which the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, “of a plurality of spinning bodies” An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage is given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery that has been drawn.”, “The effective line for determining the combination of stop symbols is fixed Have been done”, etc. In addition, as "privilege", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 13, the game machine is provided with a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation unit for rotating the plurality of rotating bodies by the player operating the game medium after the game medium is loaded. According to the combination of the stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that are rotation stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating portions and the plurality of stop operating portions for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. A slot machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

It should be noted that the light emitting decoration of the ornament by the ornament light emitting means is when the combination of symbols which is not rotating except one on the activated line satisfies the combination of winning symbols (so-called, reach). In addition, as one of the effects to be presented to the player, a plurality of decorations may be rotated by the driving means. As a result, the decoration is illuminated so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the ornament may be light-emitted, so that the ornament is light-emitted to give a strong impact to the player. When stopped with a specific combination of symbols, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage occurs (for example, "BB"), and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the movable effect having a higher effect can be shown to the player by illuminating the decorative body, it is suitable for the effect for suggesting the internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 14: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "fusion machine" that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine is a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in response to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. While displaying the variable, after that, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, and the advantage advantageous to the player (for example, , Advantageous game state). In addition, when the stop operation unit is not operated even after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachi-slot machine are fused, it is possible to obtain the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

It should be noted that the light emitting decoration of the ornament by the ornament light emitting means is when the combination of symbols which is not rotating except one on the activated line satisfies the combination of winning symbols (so-called, reach). As one of the effects to be presented to the player, the decoration may be light-emitted by the decoration light-emitting means, or the decoration may be light-emitted when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination. However, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in the game of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from below. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the front lower side. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position, as viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer lower frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated to the front, thereby making it possible for the player to hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, it is possible to entertain the player by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to a game state.

Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B), a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, or a movable effect by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a lighting effect.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is brought into contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is made of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left at a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 allows the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c to be inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the right end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat horizontal lower fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, which is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and the front is open, and a ball biting prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 by the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side that coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and thus the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 due to the game ball B staying at the site of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball catching mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B easily stays on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of the bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure of the speaker is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of the (a) seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 which are mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape, and extends upward from a front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extension portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and an edge extending from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extending from a rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the front left and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

The lock member 52, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, allows the lock body 52a to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The rear handle relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 which cover from the rear side, the door frame relay substrate cover 107, and the handle rear relay substrate 106 which covers from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved within the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for playing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 such that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatably attached to the main frame 4, and the front surface of the main frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear rear lower part on the right side in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 the height of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b in which the left end side is inclined so as to slightly project forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion concave portion 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion concave portion 101c that penetrates in the front and rear direction and the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates forward and backward at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle attaching member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 by: The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangle extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. For relaying the connection between the window interior decoration substrate 413, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portions extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being open. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcement frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcement frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114, which extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are vertically spaced apart from each other. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to a front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is square in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends horizontally against the urging force of the lock spring 124 downward, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened and a box-shaped game ball that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is opened in the front and enters from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball cover member 143 having a partition part 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 are rear-covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are respectively arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearward-opened portion of the upstream end side of the hollow guideway 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around a shaft extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bent in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction to the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extending in the front-rear direction. Of the rotary rod 143b rotatably supported on the rotary rod 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotary rod 143b, and a rotary rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-slipping slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-sledding button 222 of the dish unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time the ball holding section 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b covers the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking section 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding operation centering on the right end portion. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 145 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a, which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and extends in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the side opposite to the side and rotatably supported around a shaft that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not enter.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c is moved as the operation transmitting portion moves downward. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the power is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) and the like) that is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and is attached to the illegal gaming ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launching device 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string provided and taking the illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting opening is performed. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b by the V-shape formed by the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball passage 150a that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit, A through-ball passage 150a is provided on the lower right side in a front view toward the rear, and is provided with a full-ball receiving port 150b which is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding path of the lower full-ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a in spite of being launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and being launched upward. The foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball) and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c which are open toward the front near the lower right corner of the front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating sphere passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full-ball socket 150b and the foul-ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect, and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact part 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated to move the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be mounted on the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97 ).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is separated left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end of the body portion 171 of the security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protruding piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The crime prevention cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and a rotatably attached outer periphery on the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a which rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three grooves 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotary shafts (shaft members 187) and four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are projecting rearward from a position inside the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center. Locking projection 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so that it curves inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that is most protruded from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that is most protruded in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape, and is transparent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end thereof inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the fourth protrusion 182d is used as the first protrusion 182a and the handle 182 is replaced, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is mounted to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the operation operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The dish unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion that is approximately 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction from the left end to the right bulges to the front. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is a state in which the bottom plate is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating up and down and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The released game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extends to the left and right, and an upper plate that has an upper plate 201 that is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front portion of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and attached to the right side of the attachment base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion to the left of the left-right center when viewed from the front and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. And an upper plate ball feeding port 211e located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 and extending vertically.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e, and the mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and to the left of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g, which penetrates the front and rear below the plate main body and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h into which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion into which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a, which is assembled to the door frame 3, passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c of the unit 240 after removing the bowl and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving opening 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges to the front rather than the center of the left and right as viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that a portion of the upper plate near the right end of the upper plate body 212, which is closed at the upper end, sunk into the lower part of the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for deducting the amount of the game ball B rented out from the cash or the prepaid card thrown in and returning it.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the pullout button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or remaining money is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card loaded into the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removing bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removal of the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removal of the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231 and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removal button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 of the upper bowl removal unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Equipped with.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feed guide path 241b. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangle shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 for removing the fine bowl and the unit for removing the fine bowl 240, the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is moved. Through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c contacting the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. Therefore, the partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in a state where the upper dish ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side through the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decor unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252 separately from each other in the left and right direction. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted on the entire surface of the plate unit body 252 below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate plate decoration unit 275, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the bottom plate body, when assembled in the plate unit 200, has a bottom surface located below the bottom plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a has a bottom plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right in the upper portion, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c which extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in the shape of a box whose rear is opened, and the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the lower plate left decoration unit 280, the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower right plate decoration unit are formed on the front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left side upper bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that a player's finger can be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom face cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is placed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower dish ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and on the right end side, the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball withdrawing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In a normal state of the lower dish ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, so that the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate upper right ornament 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right ornament 276, And a plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower left ornamental body 281 and a plate lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left ornamental body 281. A plate left lower decoration substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate left lower reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulge portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The plate lower left decorative body 281 has a semi-circular curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the plate lower left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has a translucent lower dish right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish lower body attached to the rear side A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape at the right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear into the plate lower right decoration body 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making the LEDs emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 looks like the right end of the dish lower side is embedded in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration body 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be illuminated and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The production operation unit 300 is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the production operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A circular ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 340. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted on the plate center lower reflector 315. And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and forward below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a half arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The unit front cover 312, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a that projects further forward than a front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and at the same time, the plate center lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative member 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted from the rear into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate central lower decorative member 312b can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semi-circular arc shape, When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, it is possible to make the whole of them substantially uniformly light-emitting decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 is formed into a box-like shape having a substantially cubic outer shape, and has a main body 321 whose upper side is open, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and is opened upward to rotatably support the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around the axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the vertically extending axis and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332, and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface in the circumferential direction. And a boss portion 331b for protruding the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Through holes 331c that vertically penetrate through a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer top cover mounting portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion in a circle extends in an annular shape, and an outer lower surface portion 336a protruding from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a to the upper side and the center side in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b that are arranged on the lower side. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. The cylindrical surface portion 337b and the inner cover attachment portions 337c that are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and are arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are covered from the left side. 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the speed change gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at a constant interval. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple with respect to the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate and vibrate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotational operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340, and the transmission detection of the rotary drive unit 340 is performed together with the ring gear portion 350a. The gear member 345 includes a spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is formed. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such as the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the front lower side. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical center press operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation portion 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference thereof is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached to the elevating cam member 371 for elevating and lowering the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. The central button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 for urging the central button body 373 upward, and the central button body 373 are substantially the same. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 configure a central pressing operation portion 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer circumference of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and ascending/descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380, which is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center, is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 configure an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 is movable is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The lift cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the lift cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a can guide the guide pin 364 d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than an outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and a downward direction from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can cause the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape extending upward from the inner circumference of the base plate portion 378a so that the central button main body 373 has a cylindrical shape. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. Further, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is projected higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being largely protruded from the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 attach the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

Thus, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the button lifting drive motor 367, the original lowered position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation part relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the up-down detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in the plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation section. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined such that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 projects slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly projects upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 in the counterclockwise direction in left side view, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view through the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is greater than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation section 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotary operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by a player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Since the lower surface side of the rotating operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal operation state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and the central pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) to detect the pressing. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b serve as the rotation operating portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

In addition, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the push operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players may find it easier to perform a rotating operation with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be a hindrance to the rotational operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change of the rotation, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough in the position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 Door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of light emitting side window decorations 410b arranged inside the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see inside the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player who is playing on the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and it is possible to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs of the side window decoration part 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a portion corresponding to the window decoration part 410b and a plurality of side window decoration members 412 are provided. The interior reflectors 414 are inserted into the interior decorations 410b of the side windows.

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up and down direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the left-right direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration board 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (in this case, three) side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decoration member 412 in the side window is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 at a position on the upper side from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, that is, upper, lower, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end toward the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 has a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically elongated elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It appears to be embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that causes the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light is turned off. It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult for a player to see, and to make it difficult for a player to feel as if being seen by another player so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Furthermore, when the three LEDs on the side window interior decoration part 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on playing games and to prevent feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, making games more enjoyable by dedicating players to playing games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. , And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. At the front end of the top top cover 452, the center in the left-right direction protrudes most forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 respectively extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sound such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically separated from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a are The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thin, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-and-down direction, and the rotation operation section 302 arranged on the upper side and operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easily visible, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to make the player immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected farther forward than the upper dish 201, and at the same time, the dish center is raised. Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, Main body lower hinge assembly in which the base unit 500 is attached to the lower end on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 is played. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. The payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, the substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear of the main body frame base unit 500. Side cover 640 that is attached to the main frame base 501 to be opened and closed and covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. , And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. The second rail cover 555, which is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward is provided, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a having a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and a total height of about 3/4 from a position slightly lower than an upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and that restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving leftward, rightward, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f which penetrates the front and rear on the right side of the front part of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear of the gaming board mounting portion 501c which penetrates the front and back on the lower left side in the front view. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end when viewed from the front, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

On the main body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the front and rear ends of the guide main body 502a that penetrate through the front and rear and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than a length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state where the guide body 502a of the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at the upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The body frame upper hinge member 510 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main frame upper frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the front view in a horizontally extending portion and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-section in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the hitting solenoid 542 which is a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the shooting base 541 and which extends forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the hitting solenoid 542, It is equipped with a launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downward, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From above to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a back plate upper part 551d, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side and extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. The bottom plate portion 551g extends to a position substantially the same as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and the connecting plate portion 551h connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open inward of the front and the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base portion 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and extending in the left-right direction and having a box shape that is open upward, and a portion extending in the left-right direction of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is installed on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes low at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B which is circulating in two stages by this rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. 88A is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the flag (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly folding back over the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and the payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. A ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the payout path 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-removing movable piece 592, which can be held at a position where the ball-removing piece 592 closes the ball-out path 580b The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near a right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height from the top so that it gradually moves to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape that is concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left edge of the barge.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a protruding rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above to the right side in rear view. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in the portion extending from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. This allows the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b to be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball discharge passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball discharge passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payoff blade 589 for suppressing the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and breakage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball-removing movable piece 592, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball-removing passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-moving movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-balloon passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the distance from the game ball B is smaller than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, so that the ball-ball moving movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 and a box-shaped upper front full base 601 that is attached to the rear side and has an open front side. Of the upper full tank cover 602, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

In addition, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is open upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are sequentially arranged and open downward from the left side in a front view. In the upper full-ball path unit 600, which is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in front view, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank ball passage unit 610, when assembled to the payout unit 560, has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, respectively. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 that is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball receiving path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 which is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the front, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding part 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the outside of the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically near the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most to the rear. Are formed so as to have a small protrusion. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43 a so that the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. And the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, an enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly damped in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with a deep bass sound even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of the bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B emitted from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives a game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that opens to the right in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

The upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is open to the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state in which the ball guide member 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom end of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (see FIG. 97)). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the side of the main body frame 4) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the main body frame base 501 extending in the vertical direction at a rear end thereof so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. The back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600 are mounted.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and defines the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, in which a game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. The game ball B is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in either of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200, which has two general winning openings 2001 and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and the starting at the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 mounted on the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in a front view and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005, a starting opening unit 2100, and Above the side unit 2200, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided which is attached to the game area 5a at a position slightly above the center in front view.

The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a rear box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back relay box 3010. And a plurality of back production units 3100 that are installed.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view in the clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and an outer rail 1001 that passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extends to an upper right portion. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered rearward.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guide portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 penetrate the lower full tank ball. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recessed portion 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the inside has a through hole 1121 which penetrates in the front-rear direction with a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. Equipped with.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with its upper and front portions open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface. The discharge portion 1201 formed in the above can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, via the panel relay board 3031, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the general winning opening. The sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 99, displays a status indicator 1401 including three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B to the gate 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs and a normal reservation display 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting mouth 2002, and the first starting mouth A first special reserved number indicator 1405 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reservation number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. And are equipped with.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. The display device 1408 is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102), and the peripheral control board containing the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the substantially center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, has two fixing grooves 3010c open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is opened. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially penetrates the opening 1112. It projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B hit in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. The special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in either of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and in the lower part of the vertical center. The second starting port 2004 is arranged immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002, and a starting port. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and the side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 and the side unit 2200 attached on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached in the approximate center of the game area 5a. And a front presentation unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500.

The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large size. The special winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 102). In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B in 2004.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center in the front view, and the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed on the front of the. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. You can't break into.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in a front view, and the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be discharged. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 that is opened inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B emitted from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is displayed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1111), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the position of the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2503, a portion (top portion) slightly higher than both left and right sides in the center of the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley portion) on both left and right sides thereof are inclined so as to become lower toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 (the top) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right side of the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper portion of the right surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. An attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, the game ball B can be accepted with a high probability of being opened (opened).

Although not shown in detail in the table production unit 2600, depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that are movable or emit light, and can perform movable effect and light emission effect. The front production unit 2600 is capable of performing a light emission production, a movable production, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of production decorations, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present the production of various patterns to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and to entertain the player with various effects, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged. The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. To be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A magnetic sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 102).

The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a rear box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back relay box 3010. And the back production unit 3100 which is installed.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape having an open front, a square opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape projecting rearward with a gap from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in a rear view, and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, A cutout portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and has the lock mechanism 3020 attached thereto, is provided at the vertical center of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the effect display device 1600 can be fitted in the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the rear production unit 3100 and the like formed at appropriate positions.

The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning opening sensor 3001, and a first winning opening sensor 3001. It is for relaying the connection with the one starting port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

Although not shown in detail, the back production unit 3100 is in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that are movable or emit light, and can perform movable effect and light effect. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a light effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorations, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. MPU, main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has, in addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. Mouth sensor 2402, general winning a prize sensor 3001 which detects the game ball B which is received in general winning a prize 2001, gate sensor 2401 which detects the game ball B which passes gate section 2003, game ball which is accepted in large winning a prize 2005 Detection signals from the special winning opening sensor 2403 detecting B, the magnetic sensor 3003 detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I/O port.

The main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 by outputting a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals. From the main control I/O port, the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal reserved display 1403, the first special symbol display 1404, the first special reserved number display 1405, the second special The drive signal is output to the symbol display device 1406, the second special reserved number display device 1407, the round display device 1408, or the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

Also, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B is frequently entered, so the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is provided. B is also frequently detected. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launch solenoid 542, and a ball feed solenoid 145 that performs a ball feed control. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail at the time of maintenance. 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and a ball removal switch for starting the ball removal operation is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro-computer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I/O port as an I/O device, external WDT (external watch dock timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various commands regarding payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball-cutting detection sensor 574, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED display through the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 through the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, the fact that the "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, the fact that "CR is not connected" (the electric connection is cut off at any position from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of gaming balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and the signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit to output a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launching reference pulse and outputs it to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to a drive solenoid and outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data composed of a door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame I/O port for frame decoration drive board From the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , And outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 operates. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side speaker provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. A signal, a 2.1 ch surround signal, or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.) can be sent to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external device. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the production drive board of the game board 5 are serial input different from the display command. The output port is used, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The production drive board outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting/blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600 for display. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The “line buffer method” means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the case where various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scanning in the direction intersecting with the one direction sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously recorded in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is an obstacle nail. By abutting against, the downflow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest part, the game ball B contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls up and down on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the front from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on the left and right sides of the top. Is released. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the top of the center of the stage 2503, the top is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first starting port 2002 is likely to receive it. .. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage 2503 is discharged into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a is a first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, a general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and an attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 and the like.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the start. There is a possibility that the mouth unit 2100 receives the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit). , Is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. This portion is provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the drawn ordinary lottery is "normal win", the second start opening which is closed. 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are delivered from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is selected in the gate section 2003 is accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

It should be noted that if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. Further, the number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate “middle hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time shortening (time shortening) hit” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, which is also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " "Probability variation short time hit", "Probability variation short time no hit", etc.

The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 while the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout controlling board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 pieces) from the payout device 580. The game ball B of is paid out to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern for closing from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or to the special winning opening 2005. Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B, and if any of the conditions is satisfied, an opening and closing pattern that puts the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, an advantageous gaming state advantageous for the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the first starting opening 2002 from the start of the special drawing by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 until the result of the selected special drawing is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of this special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls the suggestion of the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the LEDs that are turned on after blinking a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning on and off.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each including a plurality of pictures are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board included in the door frame 3, each decorative board included in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like are appropriately used to produce a light emission effect. It is possible to perform a movable effect and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the present embodiment are the storage trays of the present invention, and the rendering operation in the rendering operation unit 300 of the present embodiment The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the partial cover unit 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention. In the unit front cover 312, the dish center lower decorative body 312b is the second decorative portion of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the embodiment respectively correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is provided on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 that is capable of opening and closing the main body frame 4 below the door window 101a. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing the water is bulged forward, and the tray unit 200 has a front end with a length of about 1/2 of the entire width of the door frame base 101. Is provided with a performance operation section cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101, and a central pressing operation section 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. A section 303b and a rotation operation section 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in which the effect operation unit 301 is attached to the upper surface is provided below the door window 101a in which the inside of the game area 5a is visible. Since it protrudes greatly to the front, the dish unit 200 (rendering operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. Further, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is largely projected forward under the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be kept away from the front end of the upper tray 201. In addition to the above, the left-right length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be made longer than in the conventional case. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his/her hand on the upper plate 201, the area hidden by the player's hand with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310 is reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emitted by the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 and the plate center lower decoration substrate 316, the player can emit light of the unit front cover 312. Can be easily noticed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is largely projected forward under the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310. Since the front end of the unit becomes as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is made to emit light by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 in accordance with the game state, and directing operation is performed. When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, the light irradiates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. With the light emitting decoration, the player's line of sight can be directed to the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front of Can be kept away from the field of view of the player to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. By illuminating and decorating the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then, when the player returns his line of sight to the game area 5a, effect images and movable By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and make a strong impact, entertain the player, and at the same time make the player think that there is something good Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the unit front cover 312 can be illuminated and decorated according to the game state so that the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a. The light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, generation of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (“big hit game”)). As a result, a premium feeling can be given to the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emission decoration, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the unit front cover 312 is largely projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he/she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area. Is easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has been placed in one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 that is largely projected forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing while enhancing appeal to the player. Also, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, and thus the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 for the purpose, the handling of the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201, and the like, which makes it difficult to give stress to the player and suppresses a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semi-annular shape, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut is projected forward, which makes it possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline in interest, and at the first glance, it is difficult for the player to get injured even if they come into contact. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe and to reassure the player, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the effect operation section 301 projecting from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, so that the dish unit 200 bulges forward below the door window 101a. Since it is possible to decorate the whole with a light emission, it is possible to make the dish unit 200 stand out and strongly attract the interest of the player, and there is nothing good for the player due to the overall light emission decoration. In addition to being able to make you think, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit 301 and urge the operation, and by making the player operate the production operation unit 301, entertain the player participation type production and entertain. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in the shape of a half donut, the dish center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316 are placed on the plate center top depending on the game state. When the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are entirely light-emitting decorated, the light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. For example, when the light emitting decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the light emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and think that something is good, and the rotary operation unit 302 mounted on the upper surface of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is provided with the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction as the light in 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b arranged above and below are alternately arranged to emit light, so that the player can see a light emission effect in which light moves up and down. At the same time, the light moving up and down can prompt the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a. Therefore, by encouraging the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b to emit light appropriately, the player is prompted to rotate the rotating operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can appropriately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, which can entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 extends forward from the side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 (outside the right side). A side in which three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the up-down direction on the flat plate-shaped door frame right side unit 410 that is extended. Since the window 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, the three side windows in the side window 410a are turned off. Through the space between the inner decoration portions 410b, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility). Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player can satisfactorily view the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

At this time, in the door frame 3 whose left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity by the part of, it is possible to make it difficult for the other player to see the entire game area 5a, as seen by the other player. By making it hard to feel, other players can play the game without hesitation. When the game progresses in the game area 5a to change to a predetermined game state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window interior. By dazzling the inside of 410a, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a columnar shape, light can be emitted in a band shape and in a radial shape, making it difficult for the side window interior decorations 410b to become dazzling and to visually recognize the opposite side. In addition, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration portion 410b by the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b, and to diminish the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a. Visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player, such as the neighbor, to see inside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, as the game state, for example, when the player is in a game state (scene) that suggests the opportunity to gain an advantage, the three side window interior decorations 410b are caused to emit light, and the side is illuminated by the glare. The visibility through the window 410a is reduced. This makes it difficult for another player, such as the neighbor, to recognize that an opportunity has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid that, because it gets distracted because other players can not concentrate on the game because they get noticed, or they feel lost due to mistakes being induced. Can be prevented, entertaining the game and suppressing a decrease in interest. Therefore, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a during a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game. It can be made more entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decorations 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. Also, since the three side window interior decorations 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window interior decorations 410b are not emitting light, the three side window interior decorations 410b in the side window 410a are passed through the opposite side. A player who can visually recognize (in the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without doing so.

Further, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decorations 410b of a certain height are made to emit light, the same height site in the game area 5a Since it can be made difficult to see from other players through the side window 410a, by causing a specific side window interior decoration portion 410b of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light according to the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (region) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of opportunities and the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a during a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game. It can be made more entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side windows 410a penetrating left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off to open the side windows 410a. Since the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a in a state where the visibility through the island machine is ensured, the island facility is not required to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make it easy to detect that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side that is farther from the left side that is hingeably attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and maintenance or replacement of the game board 5 is performed, it is possible to prevent the door frame 3 from becoming an obstacle by widening the door frame 3 and prevent the workability from deteriorating. can do.

Further, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are made to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs (so-called, Depending on the (expected value), the decoration part 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect or reach development effect, when the expected value is low, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is caused to emit light so that it is difficult for another player to see, and an advantageous game state occurs. It is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players when the player does not do so (at the time of “miss”), and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the advantageous game state occurs even if the player can easily be seen by other players by not turning on or off the decoration portion 410b in the side window (it becomes a "big hit"). By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest without becoming an awkward atmosphere, and to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, thereby increasing the interest of the player in playing the game. You can entertain the game more.

Furthermore, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility of occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called, Depending on the (expected value), the three side window interior decorations 410b are made to emit light in order (for example, bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom sides, etc.), or three side window interior decorations 410b. The particular side window interior decoration part 410b may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, as the expected value becomes higher, the three side window interior decorations 410b are made to emit light in order from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the game and to suggest the expected value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, the three side window interior decorations 410b emit light in addition to light emission (lighting) and light extinction, blinking patterns, different emission colors, and changes in emission color (for example, from cool blue to hot). It may be a change in feeling to red, a change in blue-yellow-red like a traffic signal, or a change in brightness (luminance), and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above. The three side window interior decorations 410b can further enhance the decorativeness of the door frame 3, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that attracts the player's attention.

Therefore, conversely, during execution of the reach effect or reach development effect, the advantageous game state for the player is determined by the presence or absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration parts 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of the possibility of occurrence (expected value), the player is excited depending on how the three side window interior decoration parts 410b emit light during execution of the effect.・It can be exciting, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the three side window interior decorations 410b may be made to emit light or be turned off arbitrarily by the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3. .. As a result, for example, in the case of reach production or reach development production, when the possibility (so-called expected value) of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game) is low, a production operation is performed. By operating the portion 301 and causing the decoration portion 410b in the side window to emit light, it is possible to prevent the player from being seen by another player, so that no advantageous gaming state occurs (when the player is "missing"). In addition, it is possible to prevent an awkward atmosphere from being seen by another player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation section 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration section 410b does not emit light. By turning on (or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), an advantageous game state is generated even if it is seen by another player, so that it is not an awkward atmosphere and the interest is lowered. In addition to being able to suppress it, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the operation timing of the three side window decorations 410b may be set by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, in the preset default state, since the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be seen by other players is not set, some players feel uncomfortable by looking into the game and enjoy the game. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described operational effects, which is of interest to the player's game. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) so that the ball removal movable piece 592 cannot be rotated and the ball removal is performed. When the passage 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is unable to flow to the ball passage 580b by the ball removing movable piece 592. Then, it will continue to flow to the downstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 via the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball-removing lever 593 is raised (unlocked) and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it will flow through the ball-moving movable piece 592 to the ball-passing passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 which is the island facility side through the ball-passing passage 580b. it can. Further, since the payout vane 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in a normal state, the ball removal lever 593 makes the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable (first state). On the upstream side of the payout vane 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball removing movable piece 592. Is sent to the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 pays out the game balls B one by one, so that the flow speed of the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B hits the ball. Since the force acting on the ball-removing movable piece 592 by contact is relatively weak, and the side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 that is opposite to the portion in contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball removing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, it is possible to reduce the damage of the ball-moving movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the damage of the ball-moving movable piece 592 and giving the player discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is to be discharged from the payout passage 580a at the time of replacement or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball removal lever 593 is raised to rotate the ball removal movable piece 592. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, flows down to the ball-removing passage 580b side beyond the ball-removing movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball discharge passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball discharge passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payoff blade 589 for suppressing the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner. Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and breakage of the piece 592. From this, since it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball-removing movable piece 592, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball-removing passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-moving movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-balloon passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the distance from the game ball B is smaller than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward. Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, so that the ball-ball moving movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, opening/closing around the axis extending vertically on the left side The body frame 4 that is attached so that it is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial center) on the left side of the body frame 4 are attached. In a state in which the door frame 3 that is openably and closably attached (rotatable hinge) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel, The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like on the main body frame 4 side are connected to the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, and the like on the door frame 3 side. The connection cable 503 extends to the shaft core side from a portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. 4 is held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 and further extends to the vicinity of the axis, and then is folded back and extends in a direction away from the axis, The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the door frame 3. It is connected to the.

Then, when the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hinge-rotated about the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since the portion extending from the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503 moves forward from the front surface of the frame 4 so as to be separated from the main body frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, With the deformation of the connection cable 503, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the mounting shaft 502c that is distant from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4. In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502, which is close to the axis, protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, so that the connection cable guide The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to get in the way.

In other words, since the connecting cable guide member 502 has its tip portion extended toward the shaft core side from the mounting shaft 502c that is rotatably attached, the base end portion of the guide member is fixed like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended in a direction away from the axis, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. Since the position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be set to a position where it is difficult to get in the way.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are connected. And the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, and the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be smoothly performed, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the connection cable 503, which extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side, is folded back, and extends in a direction away from the shaft core, at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) becomes a circle passing through the cable holder 103a about the axis. Since the tangent line that touches and passes through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is less than or equal to the angle that intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis line of the connection cable guide member 502 that extends is the door frame 3 It is possible not to make an angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface. In addition, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the shaft center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 on the door frame 3 side, the connection frame 503 is held relative to the main body frame 4. When closing 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side.

From these things, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 will not close or the connection cable guide will be closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the tip of the member 502 comes into contact with the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is broken. Therefore, during a game, when a problem occurs in which the door frame 3 needs to be opened and closed for maintenance, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. The game can be smoothly performed, the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, the position closer to the shaft center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the shaft center than the cable holder 103a). Is provided at a position closer to the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and the pressing portion (axial center of the speaker duct 103 relative to the cable holder 103a). A part protruding rearward on the side). Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, so that the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 is pressed in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. In addition, a tangent line passing through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and tangent to a circle passing through the pressing portion about the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens/closes) as the door frame 3 is opened/closed can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member is closed. It is possible to surely rotate the 502 in the closing direction, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, since the frame pieces 502b are respectively provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate-shaped guide body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend, so that the connection cable 503 is securely attached. The pair of frame pieces 502b can guide the connection cable 503 in the longitudinal direction, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 composed of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can reliably rotate around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state and more electric wires can be guided. Since this is possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be centralized in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, in a state where the connection cable 503 is put between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding cable 504 is passed through the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 to connect with the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 with the binding band 504 that has passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502, and the connection cable guide member 502 The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by removing the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the occurrence, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

Further, the space below the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame 4 is connected to the bottom of the outer frame that constitutes the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connecting portion 621c and the connecting tubular portion 43a. Since the space is communicated with the space (portion inside space 40a) between the port member 47 and the connection tubular portion 43a in the assembly 40, the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side allow the main body frame speaker to be connected. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of 622 can be sufficiently secured, it is possible to output a deep bass sound from the main body frame speaker 622, and entertain the player with the sound of the deep bass sound to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. You can Therefore, by providing the cable mounting recess 501h for mounting the connection cable guide member 502 on the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h which is recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described operational effect can be mounted on the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable mounting recess 501h, and the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and the interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. This can be avoided so that the door frame 3 can be surely closed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body of the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion opening 501b of the frame base 501 can be seen from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end portion in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port is formed at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end portion on the opposite side to the member 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker unit 620a that communicates with the front surface side of the main body frame speaker 622 mounted below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4 and covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of the (speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound such as voice, music, and sound effect output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front is generated by the speaker attaching portion of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through 621a and the speaker opening 211b of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate inner space 40a constituted by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. And is radiated from the port member 47 to the front side of the player. At this time, since the space (enclosure 624) on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40, The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extension in the low frequency range can be output forward from the main body frame speaker 622. In addition, since the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a in the enclosure 624). ), the width in the depth direction (front-back direction) at the connection portion can be made larger than in the conventional case, so that the widths in the front-back direction of the connecting cylinder part 43a and the connecting part 621c are made large, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a Attenuation of sound from the space to the curtain plate inner space 40a side of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Further, on the outer frame 2 side, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member can be inverted. It is possible to output a sound in which the bass is amplified from 47. The sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output front from the port member 47 interfere with each other in the front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined, so that the volume is further increased. It is possible to make the player hear richer low-pitched sound, entertain the player with sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates the sound forward (a so-called bass reflex type speaker is configured), so the main body When the sound output from the frame speaker 622 to the front and the sound output to the front from the port member 47 overlap each other, the phases of the sounds are the same, so that the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases. The sound output can be increased with a simple configuration compared to the case of using the passive radiator of.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the lower outer frame assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion opening 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical size of them can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be provided. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which the game is played is located above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower portion of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the game board insertion opening 501b in the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the main body frame 4 which constitute the lower side of the outer frame 2. Since the vertical dimension of the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. , It is possible to output a sound with a richer bass sound, entertain the player with the sound, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connecting portion 621c abuts on the connecting cylinder portion 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected and the same effect as described above can be obtained, and since the sliding resistance is not generated between the connecting cylinder part 43a and the connecting part 621c, the opening/closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance and the like.

Further, since the connection tubular portion 43a and the connection portion 621c are sealed by the seal member 48, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connection tubular portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, The pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, and thus the game board is relatively provided. The insertion slot 501b can be enlarged to include the game board 5 having a wider game area 5a, which can entertain the player more with the wider game area 5a, and through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the wider game area 5a. By seeing, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front and the sound output from the port member 47 to the front are external frames. 2 (pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position distant to the front, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and as described above, On the other hand, you can hear a rich bass sound.

Further, as described above, since the sound output from the body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is interfered and amplified near the player, other sounds separated from the pachinko machine 1 can be used. The unamplified sound will reach the player. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of an opportunity is output, the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a large volume and rich bass, thereby increasing the expectation of the game. Can be made On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing a game with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, and thus it is difficult to recognize that the opportunity for the pachinko machine 1 is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to reduce other players from looking into the pachinko machine 1, and by looking into the pachinko machine 1, the player who is playing with the pachinko machine 1 feels uncomfortable and reduces interest. Can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the position of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set to the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker is at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be set from the vicinity of the left end portion where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention strongly.

Further, as described above, a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction, so that the game ball B is discharged to the outside. A base unit 620b provided with a ball pulling guiding part 627, a discharge ball receiving part 628, and the like, and a ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1 and a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game medium balls can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be surely provided with them. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion protruding upward from the upper surface of the dish unit 200 which is bulged forward in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played. 303a, an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a and having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and an annular rotating operation surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. Since the parts 302 and the upper surface of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 are arranged so as to be inclined so that the front end side of the upper surface of the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the head (face) faces in a certain direction, the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily seen, and three large operating units (press The operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, which can give a strong impact to the player, and the operation unit which is obviously different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be recognized at a glance that the operation unit is provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player participatory effect, and to advance the game so as to be in a game state in which the player participatory effect is executed (here, a lot of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). In addition, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type effect when the player participation type effect is executed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, depending on the game state, the retreat position (lower position) in which the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 by the elevating mechanism including the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the like. ) And a projecting position (raising position) projecting upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 presses the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. Since the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position in the disabled state, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be accepted. Therefore, the central depressing operation unit 303a can be depressed with certainty, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the state of the retracted position, since the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is in a state where it cannot be pressed, there is a stationary outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a with the momentum of rotating the rotating operation unit 302, or rotating the rotating operation unit 302 with the momentum of pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. Can be made less likely to occur, the player participation type production can be surely enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Then, by moving to the protruding position, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are largely protruded upward on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, so that the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion are formed. 303b can be made conspicuous, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling for the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be given, and there is something good. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making you think that it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type effect in which the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

In this projecting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotation operating portion 302 are concentrically arranged. When the central pressing operation unit 303a has to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are pressed, or When the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b has to be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b are pressed, When the operation section 302 is rotated, or when the rotation operation section 302 has to be rotated, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a are pressed. It is possible to induce something that is pressed. This allows the player to perform a pressing operation or a rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotating operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation or the rotating operation. , It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect of performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the player's game.

Further, the player is provided with a notification means such as the vibration speaker 354 and the effect display device 1600, and in the player participation type effect, the player presses the center in the protruding position where the pressing operation of the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b is possible. When only the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is mistakenly pressed when the portion 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies the central pressing operation portion 303a that the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed. The central pressing operation unit 303a that should be operated can be surely pressed, the player can enjoy the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player is lost by making a mistake. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable, entertain the player participation type production, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the player believes that the central pressing operation unit 303a is being properly pressed, the reaction (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion that the interest is reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the player's belief can be corrected, and the central pressing operation portion 303a is correctly pressed to allow the player to participate. You can entertain the type production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate which store the game ball B for bulging forward and playing the game In the dish unit 200 provided with 202, an annular rotation operating portion 302 having an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and an inside of the ring of the rotary operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is disposed in the rotary operation unit 302 according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player participation type effect of rotating and pressing the pressing operation unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that the rotation operation or the pressing operation is performed. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest. When rotating the rotating operation unit 302, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that are exposed to the outside, and operates most, from the rotation center of the rotating operation unit 302. Since it is possible to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 by touching a distant position, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily rotated. In addition, when the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operating section 302 is touched and rotated, the rotation operating section 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the player's hand so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface in one direction. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, as described above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed, and thus the player On the other hand, it is possible to entertain the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, since the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early even if the rotation operating unit 302 is frequently rotated, and thus the rotation is prevented. It is possible to continuously entertain the player participation type effect of rotating the operation unit 302, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or can be rotated with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations can be requested to the player, It is possible to request different rotation operations for each, and it is possible to present a wider variety and variety of player participation type effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get tired and suppressing a decrease in interest. You can

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (which is constituted by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) which is touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (direction opposite to the rotation center) from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not interfere even if it is rotated to rub the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operating portion 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operating portion 302 is rounded, the rotation operating portion 302 can be rotated from a direction other than the side (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easier to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotary operating section 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operating section 302 when rotating the rotary operating section 302. Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle, or the rotation operation is easier than a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since it is possible to increase the movement of the player in the case of, it is possible to make the player feel more rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and in the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit It is possible to entertain the rotating operation of 302 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in an annular shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotationally operates the rotation operating portion 302, the upper surface is not limited to the outer peripheral side surface. Since it is possible to rotate the touch panel by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation, such as the inner peripheral side surface, and the like, the operability of the rotary operation part 302 can be further enhanced, and the game of rotating the rotary operation part 302 can be performed. It is possible to make entertaining-type production more entertaining and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the player can rotate the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operating section 302 to the outside, even if the pressing operation section 303 is provided inside the ring of the rotation operating section 302, the pressing operation is performed. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are sufficiently enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest. Can be made.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation section 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can rotate the rotation operation section 302, so that the rotation operation section 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the portion 302 can be completely different from that of a steering wheel of an automobile or a control stick of an airplane. As a result, for example, when the rotary operation unit is configured like a steering wheel of an automobile, the player thinks that the player operates the rotary operation unit at the moment when he or she sees the rotary operation unit. Since you can only operate like handle handling, you can not perform rotation operation different from handle handling when player participation type production that requires various rotation operations is executed, so player participation type production There is a risk that you may not be able to enjoy yourself and your interest in games may be diminished. However, in this embodiment, since the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from the appearance of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., the player has a prejudice about how to operate the rotation operation unit 302. The player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 according to his or her wishes, entertaining the player participation type effect, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the projecting position, since the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Thus, the protruding push operation unit 303 does not get in the way, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the front and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate that store the game balls B for bulging forward to play the game On the upper surface of the dish unit 200 provided with 202, an annular rotation operating portion 302 having a rotation shaft extending vertically, and a center pressing operating portion 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303 is formed, and the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the rotation axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect rotation. Therefore, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operating portion 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). The part that meshes with) only needs to be a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation part 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotation operation section 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape in a height between the rotation operation section 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration substrate. By appropriately making the plurality of LEDs of 352 emit light, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 can be sufficiently (uniformly) illuminated decorated. Thus, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345, It is possible to sequentially emit (turn on/off) the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the same direction and at the same speed. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are decorated with light emission. It is possible to give an illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Alternatively, according to the game state, when the player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the desired direction, the player can be prompted to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arranged in an annular shape on the production operation ring decoration substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be sequentially turned on so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated together with the rotation operation unit 302 while a certain portion of the rotation operation unit 302 is emitting light. , A strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given by the rotation of the rotation operation section 302 and the light-emitting decoration, and there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, since a plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are sequentially made to emit light, the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation section 302 can be shown to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the ring-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is for rotating operation, and to facilitate the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached rotatably around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation part 302, and when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation is performed. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the section 302, and the configuration related to the rotation operation section 302 in the dish unit 200 (production operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340). Can be made compact, the diameter of the rotation operating portion 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operating portion 302 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

Further, it is provided with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotationally drives the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, rotation capable of light emission decoration by the production operation ring decoration substrate 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around according to the game state, and light is emitted. By the decoration, the rotation operation section 302 can be made conspicuous below and in front of the game area 5a, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation section 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operating section 302 can be detected by the transmission detecting gear member 345, the first rotation detecting sensor 347, and the second rotation detecting sensor 348, when the player rotationally operates the rotation operating section 302, By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, it is possible to give a load to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be heavy. Further, in response to a rotational operation by the player, a rotational force is applied to the rotational operation section 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342, whereby the rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 is performed. A click feeling can be added. Further, by rotating the rotary operation part 302 back and forth within the predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotary operation part 302 can be vibrated. As described above, since various operation feelings can be imparted to the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to support a wider variety of player participation type effects, so that various effects can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when the operation feeling of the rotation operation section 302 is given by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in one direction or sequentially emitting light in the opposite direction to the rotating operation, the operation feeling can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotating operation of the rotating operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is set larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it is easy to secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation section 302 can be made to emit light more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the central button decoration substrate 376, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a are respectively illuminated and decorated in good condition. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating them, only the rotating operation part 302 is decorated with light emission, only the pressing operation part 303 is decorated with light emission, only the central pressing operation part 303a is decorated with light emission, and the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Only the part 303b can be decorated with light emission, and the player can easily recognize the operation part he/she wants to operate, so that the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the light is rotated by sequentially emitting light from the LEDs. It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the effect by the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when urging the player to rotate the rotating operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are sequentially made to emit light, respectively. , The lights are arranged in two rows to rotate the light. Alternatively, while the player is rotating the rotating operation unit 302, the LED (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 may rotate the light according to the rotation of the rotating operation unit 302, or On the other hand, when it is desired to promote the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emission decoration such as rotating light in the opposite direction. In this way, since the player can see the effects of various light emission, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, a rotary operation unit 302, an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and a central pressing operation unit 303a, which are arranged concentrically, are provided with a production operation ring decorative substrate 352, an outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and a central button decorative substrate 376, respectively. Since it is provided, for example, the operation operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376 are made to emit respective LEDs in this order, or in the reverse order, so that the rotation operation section 302 is provided. From the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the effect of light diffusing from the center pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown. As a result, a variety of light-emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the interest of the player can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to encourage the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to entertain the player participation type effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed. On the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that is closed as possible, a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is formed, and a glass unit 160 having a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window. It is attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close 101a, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101, an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 for storing game balls B for playing a game. The dish unit 200 equipped with is attached.

Then, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, a circular donut-shaped rotary operation portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a are attached, and a semi-circular donut shape similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operation portion 302. And two plate center upper decorations 312a and lower plate center decorations 312b having a larger diameter are attached vertically spaced apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. The door frame left side unit 400 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative unit 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative unit of the door frame top unit 450 having the same shape as described above. 453 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery pressing member are arranged. Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, which is interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation operation section 302 and the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape similar to a circular columnar shape (tube), and are provided below the rotation operation section 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration body 404, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the plate center decoration body 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 5a with a cylindrical tube, and to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved and the appeal of the player can be enhanced by directing the player's interest toward the inside (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by increasing expectations for a game on the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easy to see, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to make the player immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected farther forward than the upper dish 201, and at the same time, the dish center is raised. Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the rotation operating portion 302 has a donut shape like a circular column shape, the rotation operating portion 302 has an upper surface, an outer side surface, an inner side surface, etc. as compared with a flat disk shape. Since the fingers are easily caught, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 as he or she likes. Further, since the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are formed larger than the rotation operation section 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are larger than the rotation operation section 302. Since it protrudes to the outside, it is possible to place an arm or a finger on the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. It is possible to prevent the player from getting too close to the rotation operation unit 302 due to the presence of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b protruding forward of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotation operation unit 302 in which the arm and fingers for the player to operate can be secured, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, it is possible for the player to think of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player can be played by the player. It is possible to entertain the participatory type production and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the pressing operation part 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing operation part 303a inside the rotation operating part 302 is movable between the retracted position (down position) and the protruding position (up position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of protruding more than the rotating operation unit 302, so that the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 may appear larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, and increase the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and suppress the deterioration of interest. Can be made.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 becomes relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest can be directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 becomes more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the lowered position and the raised position according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the player is prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301 to be operated. Therefore, the player can appropriately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotating operation unit 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotating operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a have the same height, and the rotating operation is performed. The part 302 and the central pressing operation part 303a become operable, and when the pressing operation part 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing operation part 303a project above the rotation operating part 302. With this, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be used properly, and it is possible to deal with more various productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the dish center lower decoration substrate 316, the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the dish center top decoration body 312a. By making the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light, the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal can be obtained by strongly attracting the interest of the player. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 emit light as appropriate. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from within the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302) or from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a, so that the game is played. It is possible to allow the player to operate the effect operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end while the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is not pressed. Although not detected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b may be detected. Thereby, even if the same pressing operation is performed, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different presentation modes, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted. It is possible to perform a variety of player participation type effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 303 (the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the raised position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, it moves to the lowered position. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the rotation operation portion 302 is provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 that bulges forward is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the rotation operation portion is provided inside the dish unit. The outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation portion may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. Also by this, it is possible to entertain the player with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a, which is communicated with the curtain plate inner space 40a (port member 47) through the connection cylinder portion 43a, is provided in the main body frame 4, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose interior communicates with the port member 47, and the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit 101 Door frame base 101a Door window 200 Dish unit (bulging part)
201 Upper plate (reservoir plate)
202 Lower plate (reservoir plate)
300 effect operation unit 301 effect operation unit 302 rotation operation unit 303 pressing operation unit 303a central pressing operation unit 303b outer peripheral pressing operation unit 310 effect operation unit cover unit (decorative body)
311 Unit lower cover (decorative body)
312 Unit front cover (decorative body)
312a Decorative body above plate center (first decorative portion)
312b Plate lower center decoration (second decoration part)
314 Decorative plate on the center of the plate (decorative light emitting means)
316 Decorative substrate under the plate center (decorative light emitting means)
352 Performance operation ring decoration substrate (operation unit light emitting means)
376 Central button decoration board (operation unit light emitting means)
377 Peripheral button decoration board (operation unit light emitting means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having an upper plate area and a lower plate area capable of storing game balls, and provided with a plate means that bulges forward under the game area,
The dish means is provided with an operation means capable of accepting an operation by a player,
Between empty said tray means, wherein operating means are provided, formed by a member which constitutes the member and the lower tray region constitutes at least the upper tray area,
The operation means includes an operation acceptance section capable of accepting an operation, and an operation acceptance section operation means capable of operating the operation acceptance section without being operated by a player, and the operation means in the height direction. The operation receiving portion operating means has a size ranging from a position above the upper plate area at a position located behind the means to a lower side than the upper plate area, and the operation receiving section operating means constitutes the upper plate area. A game machine that is provided so as to enter below a member.

Images